diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md index 41677f24f9..83b6c22e1f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example removes the mail contact named John. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail contact that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail contact. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md index 550a45c9ff..27bdf66632 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the mail user named Ed Meadows. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail user that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md index f4371e2ec3..672fbac9b9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ This example cancels the export request by using the RequestGuid parameter for a ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). Use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter specifies the unique identifier for the export request. To find the export request GUID, use the Get-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet. If you specify the RequestGuid parameter, you must also specify the RequestQueue parameter. You can't use this parameter with the Identity parameter. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md index fd615eb7b3..cf2be3023b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example clears any corrupted delegate information from Kim's mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the target mailbox and folder. The syntax is `Mailbox:\Folder`. For the value of Mailbox, you can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the mailbox, mail user, or mail-enabled security group (security principal) that's granted permission to the mailbox folder. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetDelegateUserCollection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetDelegateUserCollection switch forces the removal of the LocalFreeBusy or the PR_FREEBUSY_ENTRYIDs files in case of corruption. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md index 4b0ccfcb1b..56619c7c57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example removes all completed import requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you created the request using the Name parameter, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md index 49d7dc1c4e..adbba4c33c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example excludes the HR Project mailbox from auto-mappi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox where you are removing permissions. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox: For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessRights parameter specifies the permission that you want to remove from the user on the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies whose permissions are being removed from the specified mailbox. You can specify the following types of users or groups (security principals) for this parameter: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearAutoMapping -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Deny -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Deny switch specifies that the permissions you're removing are Deny permissions. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritanceType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InheritanceType parameter specifies whether permissions are inherited to folders within the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md index 0f77f23c1c..59a4597166 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example deletes a specific mailbox repair request by specifying the unique ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox repair request to remove. Mailbox repair requests are identified by a complex GUID that is created when a new mailbox repair request is created. This GUID consists of a database ID, a Request ID and a job ID. The format is `DatabaseGuid\RequestGuid\JobGuid`. Use the Get-MailboxRepairRequest cmdlet to find the identity of a mailbox repair request. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index 3b1bd245ff..df18d3ae1e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example cancels the restore request by using the RequestGuid parameter for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md index 90b6f263d9..74941b143a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox search Project Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox search. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md index df48043dd3..96c9e86507 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the specified user configuration item from the mailbox juli ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user configuration item that you want to remove. This parameter uses the syntax MailboxFolder\ItemName: @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the user configuration items you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index c839114494..cde2352cac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the malware filter policy named Contoso Malware Filter Poli ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter policy you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter policy. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md index eea5a20e1b..c04a2ceb8f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the malware filter rule named Contoso Recipients. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter rule. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md index 39277631d6..7c272978a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ For more information about unscoped top-level management roles, see [Understandi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the custom role to remove. If the name of the role contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Recurse switch removes the specified role and all child roles of the specified role. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index 4a4e87c6c9..e26f54ba29 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ After the list of role assignments to be removed is confirmed, remove the WhatIf ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the role assignment to remove. If the role assignment name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md index def11dc9d1..7e6c993a43 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example forces you to acknowledge the command before proceeding (we didn't ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role entry that you want to remove. This parameter uses the syntax: `\` (for example, `CustomRole\Set-Mailbox`). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md index d21c285668..cbd3a39ac5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ After you verify that the scopes to be removed are correct, run the command agai ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the scope to remove. You can't remove a scope if it's in use by a management role assignment. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index b5634346e1..89601355c0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the MAPI virtual directory from the local server named Cont ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the MAPI virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md index 462f8cf196..30235da2fe 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example removes all messages that meet the following criteria without gener ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the message. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue\\MessageInteger or Queue\\MessageInteger or MessageInteger, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com\\5 or 10. For details about message identity, see [Message identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#message-identity). @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more messages by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a message property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"FromAddress -like '*@contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable message properties and comparison operators, see [Properties of messages in queues](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/message-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithNDR -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WithNDR parameter specifies whether a non-delivery report (NDR) is returned to the sender of a message. The default value is $true. This parameter can be used with both the Identity parameter and Filter parameter sets. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md index 3ad8456773..02a6b28f61 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the message classification named "My Message Classification ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the message classification that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the message classification. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md index 621ad34cae..5a7633aaa7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example removes the corrupted migration batch LocalMove1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the migration batch that you want to remove. The value for this parameter is the name that was specified when the migration batch was created. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md index b550b89413..2de85027b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the migration endpoint CrossForestME01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the migration endpoint you want to remove. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md index 21265c4d48..38fe6a43eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the migration user Tony Smith from a migration batch. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to remove from the migration batch. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md index d47d20a69c..f4d11ef44f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device partnership for the specified device and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device partnership that you want to remove. You can use the following values that uniquely identifies the mobile device: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 978c5c882f..c238b63ed8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device mailbox policy named Management and bypas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md index 3c1e58353f..b414be957f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The MailboxGuid and MoveRequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveRequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md index ce326f3292..3b6d435a81 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example removes the default OAB virtual directory from Server1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OAB virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md index 7d7ab5b347..a4eadbf4de 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the OAB named Contoso Executives. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OAB that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md index e1a750ebb3..f60fdee79e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the organization relationship Contoso using the Identity pa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the organization relationship that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md index 9c740ebb31..bb92d3a648 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes all Outlook protection rules from the organization. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Outlook protection rule that you want to remove. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md index 963f8c71d9..7b4a6ee9a5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example deletes the AutoDiscoverConfig object named Test Object from Active ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the AutoDiscoverConfig object to remove from Active Directory. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index 5b620c8bb2..af5b2cd99a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox policy named Corporate for the tenant Contoso i ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index a124400754..d89f980954 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the specified Outlook on the web virtual directory from the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OWA virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md index 936b9caaf0..edeb804c3f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This command removes the HRApp partner application. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the partner application. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md index d20d920506..7c5b735090 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all the custom Russian Policy Tips. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the custom Policy Tip. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index 72abe8d4c1..de97083644 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Be careful when using the Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory cmdlet without confi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the PowerShell virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md index d3d0cdf444..8dfac0ab45 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example deletes the public folder Directory Folder and all its child public ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name and path of the public folder you want to remove. A valid value uses the syntax: `\Level1\Level2\...\LevenN\PublicFolder`. For example, `"\Customer Discussion"` or `"\Engineering\Customer Discussion"`. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recurse switch specifies whether all subfolders of the specified folder should also be removed. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md index 4d3cc811a7..96e7dc9d38 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes permission for the user Chris to the public folder My Publi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path by using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the user whose permissions are being removed. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md index 0667881178..df99edf198 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example returns duplicate public folder migration requests (requests create ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the public folder mailbox migration request that you want to remove. This value uses the syntax `\PublicFolderMailboxMigration` (for example, `\PublicFolderMailboxMigrationac6d9eb4-ee49-405f-b90d-04e9a258bd7e`). @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index 8d030b34ca..374dd15017 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The RequestGuid and RequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to remove. You can use the following values: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter identifies the migration request to remove by its RequestGUID value. This parameter also requires the RequestQueue parameter. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the migration request by the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 26486f972c..8627acb82c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The RequestGuid and RequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestGuid parameter specifies the GUID of the public folder move request. If you specify the RequestGuid parameter, you must also specify the RequestQueue parameter. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md index f8720a5197..75dbe3dc79 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the Receive connector named Contoso.com Receive Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Receive connector that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Receive connector. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md index a4d1dfe0c2..66d775fc09 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the remote domain object named Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the remote domain that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the remote domain. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md index fd6ab9e40a..ff92a0cad0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the on-premises mail-enabled user Kim Akers and the associa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the mail-enabled user and the associated mailbox in the service that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreLegalHold switch ignores the legal hold status of the remote user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md index c85c142160..4ece31ad16 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all resubmit requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the resubmit request you want to remove. Each resubmit request is identified by an incremented integer value. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md index 0475a58a8f..010d3880a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example removes the retention policy Business Critical, which is assigned t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the retention policy name. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md index d8d0bfdde8..fc50717840 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the retention tag Finance-DeletedItems. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the retention policy tag. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index 5b564b0d0d..ee27eb7529 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ For more information about the Where cmdlet and pipelining, see [Working with co ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the assignment policy to remove. If the assignment policy name has spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md index 8823aa5d8b..e70371f1c6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the Vancouver Recipient Administrators role group. Because ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group to remove. If the role group name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md index a7c39c03c7..b6fcbbf46e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example removes the Training Assistants USG from the Training Administrator ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group that you want to remove a member from. If the role group name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Member -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Member parameter specifies who to remove from the role group. You can specify the following types of users or groups (security principals) for this parameter: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md index f0db065269..734253fba9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the search document format with an identity equal to "sct". ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the format to be removed. You can use the Get-SearchDocumentFormat cmdlet to view the identities of the installed formats. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md index 731a453bec..e76cacedf7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the Send connector named Contoso.com Send Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name, or GUID of the Send connector. If the Identity name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). You can omit the Identity parameter label. You can also include the server name by using the format ServerName\\ConnectorName. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md index d4d2e18a65..2df2f375d2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes a server monitoring override of the ExtensionAttributes pro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the monitoring item that was overridden. The value is in the form of HealthSet\\MonitoringItem or HealthSet\\MonitoringItem\\TargetResource. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemType parameter specifies the item type of the override that you want to remove. It can be any of the following values: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyName parameter specifies the property for the override you want to remove. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that contains the override that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md index be10212190..3553943047 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the setting override named IM Server Integration. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the setting override that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the override. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md index 719d9621a8..df9b839429 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the sharing policy Contoso and suppresses the confirmation ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the sharing policy that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index 78406d422b..8ce50bb76a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the site mailbox policy named Default that was created when ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox provisioning policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md index 7f22253212..0b0ae0b641 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example permanently purges all soft-deleted mailboxes from mailbox database ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the mailbox database that contains the mailbox to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox that you want to remove. Use the mailbox GUID as the value for this parameter. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxState parameter specifies the mailbox state on the source mailbox database. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md index 3815b75020..59f9f6fb22 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes all Sweep rules in the specified mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Sweep rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the rule you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md index 5b7c3b265b..820d10e781 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This cmdlet is only used by the Sync-MailPublicFolders.ps1 script. Don't run thi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mail-enabled public folder object that you want to remove from Exchange Online. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md index 159bf7e9fa..1213f6465d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the specified custom quota message (combination of language ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the custom system message that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the system message. For example: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md index 34b4dbf066..094ae1ab94 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ You can't remove a policy that's associated with any users. This example reassig ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the throttling policy you want to remove. Use the name that matches the name of the policy in Active Directory. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md index 6efbe05339..91eb6434d2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the rule named "Redirect messages from kim@contoso.com to l ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md index 7fdc01f89c..28cf153f71 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example deletes the photo associated with Ann Beebe's user account. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearMailboxPhotoRecord -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearMailboxPhoto switch specifies that a deleted mailbox photo is considered blank instead of deleted. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupMailbox switch is required to modify Microsoft 365 Groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotoType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index 146c97aa5f..d095b5cdae 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the Exchange Web Services virtual directory named Sales fro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the EWS virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index d15a9671e2..37a5815f57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the X.400 authoritative domain object for the X.400 authori ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a string value for the X.400 authoritative domain. Enter either the GUID or the name of the X.400 authoritative domain. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md index 304b16a5f9..810db51c98 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example runs in a multi-tenant deployment by a data center administrator to ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server that the application you want to reset is running on. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Application -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Application parameter specifies the specific administrative application to reset the provisioning cache for. You can use the following values: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalCache -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GlobalCache switch clears all cache keys. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CacheKeys -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CacheKeys parameter specifies the value for the cache key that you want to clear. The format for the values should contain 32 digits separated by four dashes: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CurrentOrganization -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CurrentOrganization switch resets the provision cache for the organization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Organizations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Organizations parameter specifies the organizations where the provisioning cache is reset. Use this parameter in multi-tenant deployments. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index d57df551a4..05ca97870d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example activates member servers in the DAG DAG1 for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG being manipulated. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveDirectorySite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveDirectorySite parameter specifies the site containing the DAG members to be restored. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of an alternate directory used to store witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs or used for any other purpose. This value can be populated ahead by using the Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup cmdlet. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a new witness server for the DAG as part of a site activation process. This value can be populated ahead by using the Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup cmdlet. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePrimaryWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UsePrimaryWitnessServer switch specifies that the DAG's currently configured witness server should be used if a witness is needed by the DAG members that are being activated. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md index c535b125f8..fa1f5da099 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example restores the default attributes to the User details template for th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or specifies the details template type and language separated by a backslash, for example, en-us\\User. Details template types include: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md index 7dfbf5787e..a4fa08974d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ This example bulk restores all the recoverable items for administrator. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the deleted items that you want to restore. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryID parameter specifies the deleted item that you want to restore. The EntryID value for the deleted item is unique in the mailbox. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterEndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterEndTime specifies the end date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterItemType parameter filters the results by the specified MessageClass (ItemClass) property value of the deleted item. For example: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterStartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterStartTime specifies the start date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastParentFolderID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LastParentFolderID parameter specifies the FolderID value of the item before it was deleted. For example, 53B93149989CA54DBC9702AE619B9CCA000062CE9397. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies where to search for deleted items in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContains parameter filters the deleted items by the specified text value in the Subject field. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 645c002cfe..8665313ed1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example resumes replication and replay activity for the copy of the databas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the database whose copying is being resumed. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableReplayLag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableReplayLag switch disables any configured replay lag time for the database copy when the passive copy is resumed. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableReplayLagReason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableReplayLagReason parameter is used with the DisableReplayLag parameter to specify an administrative reason for disabling replay lag time for a passive copy. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationOnly switch resumes replication without affecting the activation setting (for example, the ActivationSuspended property for the database copy remains set to True). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md index 9dd5908f7a..b3adf7bcd2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example resumes any failed export move requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). Use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md index 785786b9af..84b68f065c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example resumes all failed import requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you created the request using the Name parameter, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index fad77ae856..e724a01e35 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example resumes any restore request with the status of Failed. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md index 0e3a1e81b7..8e12b6fcb9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example resumes delivery of all messages in a suspended state and for which ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the message. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue\\MessageInteger or Queue\\MessageInteger or MessageInteger, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com\\5 or 10. For details about message identity, see [Message identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#message-identity). @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more messages by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a message property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"FromAddress -like '*@contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable message properties and comparison operators, see [Properties of messages in queues](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/message-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md index b1659f57e9..04cf94c12d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example resumes any move requests that have the suspend comment "Resume aft ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete switch suspends the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index bd11ab1149..be2acbe60f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example resumes any failed migration requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to resume. You can use the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 3573fecc7e..829cf0927e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example resumes a move request that has the suspend comment "Resume after 1 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md index fcd4ceaf1c..8accbc01e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example resumes processing of all queues where the NextHopDomain is Fourthc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the queue. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue or Queue, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see [Queue identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md index 20b8cbb918..211362d848 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example forces a connection attempt for all queues that meet the following ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the queue. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue or Queue, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see [Queue identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Resubmit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Resubmit parameter specifies whether the queue contents should be resubmitted to the categorizer before a connection is established. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md index a1fe3fddee..870d841fbc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This example returns entries in the administrator audit log of an Exchange Onlin ### -Cmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Cmdlets parameter filters the results by the cmdlets that were used. You can specify multiple cmdlets separated by commas. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalAccess parameter filters the results by changes that were made (cmdlets that were run) by users outside of your organization. Valid values are: @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The IsSuccess parameter filters the results by whether the changes were successful. Valid values are: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ObjectIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ObjectIds parameter filters the results by the object that was modified (the mailbox, public folder, Send connector, transport rule, accepted domain, etc. that the cmdlet operated on). A valid value depends on how the object is represented in the audit log. For example: @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter filters the results by the parameters that were used. You can only use this parameter with the Cmdlets parameter (you can't use it by itself). You can specify multiple parameters separated by commas. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. The default value is 1000. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartIndex parameter specifies the position in the result set where the displayed results start. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The UserIds parameter filters the results by the user who made the change (who ran the cmdlet). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md index 31efc27c8a..f9a7bd3a44 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ This example searches all mailboxes in your organization for messages that conta ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox to search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateResultOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EstimateResultOnly switch returns only an estimate of the total number and size of messages. Messages aren't copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetFolder parameter specifies a folder name in which search results are saved in the target mailbox. The folder is created in the target mailbox upon execution. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: You need to be assigned the Mailbox Import Export management role to use this switch. By default, this role isn't assigned to any role group (including Organization Management). Typically, you assign a role to a built-in or custom role group. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotIncludeArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DoNotIncludeArchive switch specifies that the user's archive mailbox shouldn't be included in the search. You don't need to specify a value for this switch. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeUnsearchableItems switch includes items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search in the search results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the logging level for the search. It can have one of the following values: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogOnly switch performs a search, but only generates a log. Messages returned by the search aren't copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchDumpster switch specifies whether to include the Recoverable Items folder in the search. The Recoverable items folder stores items that were deleted from the Deleted Items folder or items that were hard-deleted until they're purged from the mailbox database. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchDumpsterOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchDumpsterOnly switch specifies that only the Recoverable Items folder of the specified mailbox is searched. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchQuery parameter specifies a search string or a query formatted using Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information about KQL in Exchange, see [Message properties and search operators for In-Place eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/security-and-compliance/in-place-ediscovery/message-properties-and-search-operators). @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md index 8a20ce8c36..d94d150151 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ This example retrieves mailbox audit log entries for Ken Kwok's mailbox for acti ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies a single mailbox to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAccess parameter specifies whether to return only audit log entries for mailbox access by users that are outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, this parameter returns audit log entries for mailbox access by Microsoft datacenter administrators. Valid values are: @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachments parameter filters the search by messages that have attachments. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogonTypes parameter specifies the type of logons. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailboxes parameter specifies the mailboxes to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. You can use this parameter to search audit logs for multiple mailboxes. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Operations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Operations parameter filters the search results by the mailbox actions that are logged by mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of mailbox audit log entries to return. Valid values include an integer from 1 through 250000. By default, 1000 entries are returned. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowDetails switch retrieves the details of each log entry from the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md index 87a469ee90..6f8d6c7f06 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ This example returns the message tracking reports that the Help desk can analyze ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter scopes the search to the specified mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Sender parameter specifies the email address of the message sender for messages that are sent to the mailbox that's specified by the Identity parameter. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassDelegateChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassDelegateChecking switch allows Help desk staff and administrators to track messages for any user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotResolve -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DoNotResolve switch specifies whether to prevent the resolution of email addresses to display names. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageEntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageId parameter filters the results by the Message-ID header field of the message. This value is also known as the Client ID. The format of the Message-ID depends on the messaging server that sent the message. The value should be unique for each message. However, not all messaging servers create values for the Message-ID in the same way. Be sure to include the full Message ID string (which might include angle brackets) and enclose the value in quotation marks (for example, ""). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter filters the results by the email addresses of the specified recipients. You can specify multiple email addresses separated by commas. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Subject parameter searches for messages with the specified Subject field value. If the value contains spaces, enclosed the value in quotation marks. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TraceLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TraceLevel parameter specifies the details to include in the results. Valid values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md index af84b61d3e..6571b18577 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example sends the text messaging verification code to Tony Smith's mobile p ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox where you are trying to enable text messaging notifications. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md index 537e6dd15f..f1c61d1cfa 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example sets the scope of the current session to the entire forest and desi ### -PreferredServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferredServer parameter specifies the FQDN of the domain controller to be used for this session. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RunspaceServerSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RunspaceServerSettings parameter specifies whether to pass an entire configuration object to the command to be processed. This parameter is useful in scripts where an entire object must be passed to the command. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationDomainController parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the configuration domain controller to be used for reading Exchange configuration information in this session. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferredGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the FQDN of the global catalog server to be used for reading recipient information in this session. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientViewRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientViewRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) to include in the recipient scope for this session. When you specify a recipient scope with this parameter, only the recipients included in the scope are returned. To specify an OU, use the syntax `/`. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPreferredDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SetPreferredDomainControllers parameter specifies the list of domain controllers used to read information from Active Directory in this session. You must specify the FQDN of the domain controllers. Separate multiple domain controllers using commas. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ViewEntireForest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ViewEntireForest parameter specifies whether all the objects in the forest are viewed and managed in this session. Valid values are $true and $false. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md index 03b5ba59ce..d944da297f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example configures the Active Directory site named Default-First-Site-Name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the Active Directory site you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the Active Directory site. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HubSiteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HubSiteEnabled parameter specifies whether this site acts as a hub site. The default value is $false. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InboundMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InboundMailEnabled parameter enables or disables receiving incoming messages for all Exchange servers located in the Active Directory site. Typically, you use this parameter after Active Directory site failover or maintenance. Valid values are: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PartnerId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md index f47a8b17c3..8714158ab8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example assigns an Exchange-specific cost of 25 to the IP site link DEFAULT ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name or GUID of the IP site link you want to modify. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeCost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeCost parameter specifies an Exchange-specific cost for the IP site link. This cost is used instead of the Active Directory-assigned cost. To clear the value of the ExchangeCost parameter and revert to using the cost of the IP site link specified in Active Directory, set the value of the ExchangeCost parameter to $null. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass across the Active Directory IP site link. The default value is unlimited. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the IP site link. The name that you assign overwrites the current identity of the IP site link. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md index 6c681e1ca8..79b84fb443 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example makes the accepted domain Contoso the default accepted domain. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the accepted domain you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the accepted domain object. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the accepted domain. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainType parameter specifies the accepted domain type. Valid values are: @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MakeDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MatchSubDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MatchSubDomains parameter enables mail to be sent by and received from users on any subdomain of this accepted domain. The default value is $false. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingRemoval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index b2dfc71570..bf13bff81e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example changes the organization's device access rule so that all devices e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the device access rule. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessLevel parameter specifies whether the devices are allowed, blocked or quarantined. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md index 8b29f977a3..7eedcada2e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example sets the autoblock threshold rule RecentCommands with several setti ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the autoblock threshold rule. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminEmailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminEmailInsert parameter specifies the text to include in the email sent to the user when a mobile device triggers an autoblock threshold rule. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BehaviorTypeIncidenceDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BehaviorTypeIncidenceDuration parameter specifies the interval (in minutes) within which the BehaviorType must occur to trigger the autoblock rule. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BehaviorTypeIncidenceLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BehaviorTypeIncidenceLimit parameter specifies the number of occurrences of the behavior type needed to trigger blocking. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceBlockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeviceBlockDuration parameter specifies the length of time (in minutes) that the mobile device is blocked. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index d5222a900b..eb05bd85e3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ This example sets several policy settings for the Mobile Device mailbox policy D ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Mobile Device mailbox policy. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile phone. The available options are Disable, HandsfreeOnly, and Allow. The default value is Allow. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter indicates whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile phone's camera is allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the mobile phone user can configure a personal email account on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to emails using non-Microsoft mobile phone email programs. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. The default value is $true. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile phone. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML email is enabled on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. The default value is $true. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy can be sent to the mobile phone over a cellular data connection. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile phones can synchronize with the server running Exchange. When set to $true, the AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter enables all mobile phones to synchronize with the Exchange server, regardless of whether the phone can enforce all the specific settings established in the Mobile Device mailbox policy. This also includes mobile phones managed by a separate device management system. When set to $false, this parameter blocks mobile phones that aren't provisioned from synchronizing with the Exchange server. The default value is $false. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can initiate a remote desktop connection. The default value is $true. @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimpleDevicePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimpleDevicePassword parameter specifies whether a simple device password is allowed. A simple device password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. The default value is $true. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile phone can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can access information stored on a storage card. The default value is $true. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be executed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile phone must be alphanumeric. The default value is $false. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a list of approved applications for the mobile phone. @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded. When set to $false, the AttachmentsEnabled parameter blocks the user from downloading attachments. The default value is $true. @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter specifies whether encryption is enabled. The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter, when set to $true, enables device encryption on the mobile phone. The default value is $false. @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required. When set to $true, the DevicePasswordEnabled parameter requires that the user set a password for the mobile phone. The default value is $false. @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordExpiration parameter specifies the length of time, in days, that a password can be used. After this length of time, a new password must be created. The format of the parameter is dd.hh.mm:ss, for example, 24.00:00 = 24 hours. @@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of previously used passwords to store. When a user creates a password, the user can't reuse a stored password that was previously used. @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent from the server to the mobile phone. @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mailbox policy. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile phone. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the device. The value is specified by entering one of the following values: @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile phone. You can enter any number from 4 through 16. The default value is 8. @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile phone. The value is specified by entering one of the following values. @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile phone. The value is specified in kilobytes (KB). @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are synchronized to the mobile phone. The value is specified in KB. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile phone can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. You can enter any interval between 30 seconds and 1 hour. The default value is 15 minutes. The format of the parameter is hh.mm:ss, for example, 15:00 = 15 minutes. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the minimum number of complex characters required in a mobile phone password. A complex character isn't a letter. @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordLength parameter specifies the minimum number of characters in the device password. You can enter any number from 1 through 16. The maximum length a password can be is 16 characters. The default value is 4. @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the friendly name of the Mobile Device mailbox policy. @@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile phone is stored on an Exchange server. When set to $true, the PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter enables you to store the recovery password for the mobile phone on an Exchange server. The default value is $false. The recovery password can be viewed from either Outlook on the web or the Exchange admin center. @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the device. The default value is $false. @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether you must encrypt S/MIME messages. The default value is $false. @@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when encrypting a message. @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile phone must synchronize manually while roaming. The default value is $false. @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when signing a message. @@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile phone must send signed S/MIME messages. @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is enabled for the mailbox policy. Setting this parameter to $true also sets the DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter to $true. @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter contains a list of applications that can't be run in ROM. @@ -1130,7 +1130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md index c1e59f6d4b..c020f0c314 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example sets the default access level to quarantine and sets two administra ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the ActiveSync organization settings object that you want to modify. The default name of this object is Mobile Mailbox Settings. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AdminMailRecipients parameter specifies the email addresses of the administrators for reporting purposes. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowAccessForUnSupportedPlatform -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRMSSupportForUnenlightenedApps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultAccessLevel parameter specifies the access level for new and existing device partnerships. Valid values are: @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtaNotificationMailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OtaNotificationMailInsert parameter specifies the text to include in an email message that's sent to users who need to update their older devices to use the new Exchange ActiveSync features in Microsoft Exchange. @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserMailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserMailInsert parameter specifies an informational footer that's added to the email message sent to users when their mobile device isn't synchronized because the device is quarantined. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index 676037bf7e..70e34052a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ This example configures the external URL on the default Exchange ActiveSync virt ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ActiveSync virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveSyncServer parameter specifies the URL of the Mailbox server. This value is in the following format: https://servername/Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemReportingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemReportingEnabled parameter specifies whether items that can't be synchronized should be reported to the user. If set to $true, the user receives a notification when an item can't be synchronized to the mobile phone. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientCertAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClientCertAuth parameter specifies the status of client certificate authentication. By default, client certificate authentication is disabled. The default setting is Ignore. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompressionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompressionEnabled parameter is a Boolean value that identifies the compression applied to the specified Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. The default setting is $true. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstallIsapiFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstallIsapiFilter parameter specifies whether the Internet Server API (ISAPI) filter is installed. @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods supported by the server that contains the virtual directory when access is requested from inside the network firewall. If this parameter isn't set, all authentication methods can be used. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertificateAuthorityURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertificateAuthorityURL parameter specifies the URL for the certification authority (CA) used by the mobile phone. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertificateProvisioningEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertificateProvisioningEnabled parameter specifies whether the Autodiscover service returns the Certificate Services server URL in the XML file. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertTemplateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertTemplateName parameter specifies the template name for the client certificate. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsActionForUnknownServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsActionForUnknownServers parameter specifies the action that occurs when a Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services or Microsoft Windows file share request comes in via Exchange ActiveSync. When a request arrives, Exchange ActiveSync looks for the requested host name in the Allow and Block lists. If the host name isn't found in either list, the action specified in this parameter, either Block or Allow, is performed. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsAllowedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsAllowedServers parameter is a multivalued property that lists all the allowed servers for remote document access. @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsBlockedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsBlockedServers parameter is a multivalued property that lists all the blocked servers for remote document access. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsInternalDomainSuffixList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsInternalDomainSuffixList parameter is used in organizations that don't run Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) in their network. In these environments, you can specify one or more FQDNs that Exchange ActiveSync treats as internal when a request for remote file access is received. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendWatsonReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendWatsonReport parameter specifies whether a Watson report is sent for errors and events. @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthEnabled parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled. The default value is $false. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md index 3ca49ee585..d9cbb93845 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example changes the OAB that the address book policy All Fabrikam ABP uses ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the address book policy that you want to modify. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalAddressList parameter specifies the GAL for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name that you want this address book policy to be called. Use this parameter to change the name of the address book policy. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the OAB for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoomList parameter specifies an address list that used for location experiences for mailbox users who have this address book policy assigned to them. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md index 72c8d4e3e6..bb34e97f03 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example modifies the type of recipients and the department of the recipient ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the address list. The maximum length is 64 characters, and it can't include a carriage return or a backslash (\\). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md index 10e8fe26ff..8fef843742 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example changes the existing address rewrite entry named "Address entry for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address rewrite entry you want to modify. You can specify the name or GUID of the address rewrite entry. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionList parameter specifies the domain names that should be excluded from address rewriting when the InternalAddress parameter contains a value that specifies multiple domain names. You can separate multiple domain names included with the ExceptionList parameter with commas. For more information about how to add values to or remove values from multivalued properties, see [Modifying multivalued properties](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/modifying-multivalued-properties-exchange-2013-help). @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAddress parameter specifies the final email addresses that you want. If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single email address (chris@contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must also specify a single email address (support@contoso.com). If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single domain (contoso.com) or a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must specify a single domain (fabrikam.com). @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAddress parameter specifies the original email addresses that you want to change. You can use the following values: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for this address rewrite entry. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundOnly parameter enables or disables outbound-only address rewriting. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The value $true means address rewriting occurs in outbound mail only. The value $false means address rewriting occurs on outbound mail and also on inbound mail (rewritten email addresses are changed back to the original email addresses in inbound mail). The default value is $false. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md index 42c5b5bdfa..0a6ed0dac7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example enables administrator audit logging only for specific parameters th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogExcludedCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogParameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TestCmdletLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnifiedAuditLogIngestionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md index 4fe9357f89..ac6e743d11 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example disables the organization app named FinanceTestApp across the organ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the AppID (GUID value) of the app that you want to modify. To find the GUID value of an app, run the command Get-App | Format-Table -Auto DisplayName,AppId. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultStateForUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultStateForUser parameter specifies the default initial state of the organization app for the specified users. Valid values are: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the app is available to users in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational (not bound to a specific user). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies that the app you want to modify is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProvidedTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProvidedTo parameter specifies the availability of the app in your organization. Valid value are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserList parameter specifies who can use an organizational app. This parameter is limited to 1000 users. In the cloud-based service, this value is less relevant as Office Add-in management is moving to [Centralized Deployment](https://learn.microsoft.com/office/dev/add-ins/publish/centralized-deployment). @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md index 40c8190235..87b10a0fa8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example modifies the action that the Attachment Filtering agent takes on an ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Action parameter specifies how the Attachment Filtering agent handles an attachment that matches an entry on the attachment filter list. Valid values are: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminMessage parameter specifies the content of a text file that replaces attachments removed by the Attachment Filtering agent. The AdminMessage parameter only appears when the Attachment Filtering agent is configured to remove an attachment that's been identified as bad. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionConnectors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionConnectors parameter specifies a list of connectors that should be excluded from attachment filtering. Attachment filters aren't applied to email messages received through these connectors. You must use the connector GUID to specify the ExceptionConnectors parameter value. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectResponse parameter specifies the message body that you want delivered in the NDR to senders whose messages contain an attachment that's blocked. The RejectResponse parameter is required only if you set the Action parameter to Reject. Don't exceed 240 characters in the parameter argument. When you pass an argument, you must enclose the RejectResponse parameter value in quotation marks (") if the phrase contains spaces, for example: "Message rejected". The default setting is Message rejected due to unacceptable attachments. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch.